diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderIdConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderIdConfig.md index a48fe97c5b..81bcb35fbc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderIdConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderIdConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the Sender ID configuration on t ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderReputationConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderReputationConfig.md index 8bec50233b..e4512448d3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderReputationConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderReputationConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the sender reputation configurat ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerComponentState.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerComponentState.md index 357deadb5d..8f7f96e303 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerComponentState.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerComponentState.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the component state of the Unified ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to view the configuration settings. You can use the following values: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Component -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Component parameter specifies the component or endpoint for which you want to retrieve the state. To see the available values, run the following command: `Get-ServerComponentState `. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerHealth.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerHealth.md index 19532a3368..5b71ddbc7c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerHealth.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerHealth.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example returns the server health for server Server01. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HaImpactingOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The HaImpactingOnly switch specifies whether the cmdlet must roll up only the monitors that have HaImpacting set to True. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HealthSet -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The HealthSet parameter returns the health state of a group of monitors. Monitors that are similar or are tied to a component's architecture are grouped to form a health set. You can determine the collection of monitors (and associated probes and responders) in a given health set by using the Get-MonitoringItemIdentity cmdlet. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerMonitoringOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerMonitoringOverride.md index afcf7555af..720886c80d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerMonitoringOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerMonitoringOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example retrieves all monitoring overrides for the Exch01 server. ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SettingOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SettingOverride.md index 3a53168c56..017e066e64 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SettingOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SettingOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example displays a detailed information for the setting override object nam ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the setting override that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the override. For example: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SharingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SharingPolicy.md index 8f7acb12f7..86326ea869 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SharingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SharingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example retrieves the full information for the sharing policy Fabrikam. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the sharing policy that you want to view. You can use one of the following values: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailbox.md index 72d4c05408..e6cecbe607 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example queries for site mailboxes that are marked for deletion and removes ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the site mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassOwnerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassOwnerCheck parameter is used when the account that's running the command isn't a member or owner of the site mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeletedSiteMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeletedSiteMailbox switch returns site mailboxes that have been marked for pending deletion. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReadFromDomainController switch specifies that information should be read from a domain controller in the user's domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxDiagnostics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxDiagnostics.md index 89878ddd9b..d1fc25520b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxDiagnostics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxDiagnostics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example returns the event information for the Marketing Events 2015 site ma ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the site mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the site mailbox. For example: @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassOwnerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassOwnerCheck parameter is used when the account that's running the command isn't a member or owner of the site mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendMeEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendMeEmail switch specifies that the diagnostic information is sent to the primary SMTP email address of the user account that's running the command. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md index aa2e7109d2..5f5dcbe69b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the site mailbox provisioning po ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the site mailbox provisioning policy that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SmimeConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SmimeConfig.md index 248d152e27..ba46b91d68 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SmimeConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SmimeConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example shows the S/MIME configuration that's used with Outlook on the web. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-StoreUsageStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-StoreUsageStatistics.md index df48bbb8a6..8fb4dd1461 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-StoreUsageStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-StoreUsageStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ This example retrieves store usage statistics for database DB1 and sorts the out ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox to get usage statistics from. You can use one of the following values to identify the mailbox: @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Database parameter specifies the name of the mailbox database to get usage statistics from (the top 25 largest mailboxes on the specified mailbox database). You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox database. For example: @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Mailbox server to get usage statistics from (the top 25 mailboxes on all active databases on the specified server). You can use one of the following values to identify the server: @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CopyOnServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CopyOnServer parameter specifies the mailbox database copy to get usage statistics from. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox database. For example: @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludePassive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludePassive switch specifies whether to include usage statistics from active and passive copies of mailbox databases on the Mailbox server you specified with the Server parameter. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SweepRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SweepRule.md index 55817a5d14..da057d7310 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SweepRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SweepRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the Sweep rule with the specified ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Sweep rule that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassScopeCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassScopeCheck switch specifies whether to bypass the scope check for the user that's running the command. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter filters the results by the specified mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Provider -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Provider parameter filters the results by the specified provider. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SystemMessage.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SystemMessage.md index f04bf393c2..e1fe24a3eb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SystemMessage.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SystemMessage.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ You should output the list to a file, because the list is very long, and you get ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the custom system message that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the system message. For example: @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Original -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Original switch filters the results by the default system messages that are included with Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TextMessagingAccount.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TextMessagingAccount.md index 929df3f676..6991b2a2b4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TextMessagingAccount.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TextMessagingAccount.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example finds all user mailboxes where text messaging notifications are ena ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReadFromDomainController switch specifies that information should be read from a domain controller in the user's domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicy.md index 43844b9234..3425dedb68 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example displays the parameters and values for throttling policy Throttling ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter identifies the name of the throttling policy that you want to return settings for. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostics -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Diagnostics switch specifies whether you want the output to include the diagnostics string. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Explicit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Explicit switch specifies whether to return only the policy settings that have been directly assigned using this policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThrottlingPolicyScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ThrottlingPolicyScope parameter specifies the scope of the throttling policy. You can use the following values: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation.md index 8ba0ee4aea..96ab8b7745 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the throttling policy association ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the throttling policy association that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the throttling policy association. For example: @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThrottlingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ThrottlingPolicy parameter filters the results by throttling policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the throttling policy. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportAgent.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportAgent.md index 1be1f2f60b..6d15812ff3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportAgent.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportAgent.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example displays detailed information about the Transport Rule agent that's ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the display name of the transport agent to be displayed. The length of the name can't exceed 64 characters. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportService -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransportService parameter specifies the transport service that you want to view or modify. Valid values for this parameter are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportConfig.md index ffef43d5a4..aae5714bfc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example lists all delivery status notification-related (DSN) configuration ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportPipeline.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportPipeline.md index 31d4c51174..75dccf9a86 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportPipeline.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportPipeline.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example returns a list of agents registered in the transport pipeline, with ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRule.md index 00a45e85c7..8a2eecaadb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example returns a summary list of all rules that e ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the rule that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -State -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The State parameter specifies filters the results by enabled or disabled rules. Valid values are: @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DlpPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter filters the results by using an OPATH. This parameter searches the Description property, which includes the conditions, exceptions, actions and the associated values of a transport rule. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRuleAction.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRuleAction.md index 5d266e9ba2..e68c4223b8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRuleAction.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRuleAction.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ For more information about pipelining, see [About Pipelines](https://learn.micro ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the action that you want to view. To see the list of available names, run the command Get-TransportRuleAction. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRulePredicate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRulePredicate.md index 0a039b0a93..bf8df73ee2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRulePredicate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRulePredicate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ For more information about how to work with the output of a command, see [Workin ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the predicate that you want to view. To see the list of available names, run the command Get-TransportRulePredicate. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportServer.md index c4e3d2faa6..03fbc9ba82 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example retrieves the detailed transport configuration information for the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Transport server that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportService.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportService.md index 2f68807ab2..dde404dc0d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportService.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportService.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example retrieves the detailed transport configuration information for the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Mailbox server that hosts the Transport service configuration you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Trust.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Trust.md index a188003b37..0ebb762b37 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Trust.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Trust.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example enumerates all trusts for the domain Contoso.com. ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainName parameter specifies that trusts returned are restricted to the domain name specified. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-User.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-User.md index 1c78f20404..6d70b49b80 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-User.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-User.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -104,9 +104,9 @@ This example uses the Filter parameter to retrieve information about all users t ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection -The Identity parameter the user that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: +The Identity parameter specifies the user that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: - Name - User principal name (UPN) @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Arbitration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuxAuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance The PublicFolder switch is required to return public folder mailboxes in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientTypeDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientTypeDetails parameter filters the results by the specified user subtype. Valid values are: @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Sortby -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. @@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SupervisoryReviewPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPhoto.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPhoto.md index fe70eb0bcf..14e09ae227 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPhoto.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPhoto.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ This example displays information about the user photo that was uploaded to Pila ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the user account. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user account. For example: @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GroupMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GroupMailbox switch is required to return Microsoft 365 Groups in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhotoType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Preview -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Preview switch filters the results by preview photos. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReadFromDomainController switch specifies that information should be read from a domain controller in the user's domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPrincipalNamesSuffix.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPrincipalNamesSuffix.md index a33308cebd..6430bf259d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPrincipalNamesSuffix.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPrincipalNamesSuffix.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example returns all UPN suffixes for the Active Directory forest. ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md index da0f74a7e0..9d9c09075b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ This example returns a summary list of all virtual directories in the client acc ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the EWS virtual directory that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADPropertiesOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ADPropertiesOnly switch specifies whether to return only the virtual directory properties that are stored in Active Directory. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories switch shows information about backend virtual directories on Mailbox servers. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md index a16c7bb305..c236807d50 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ This example displays detailed information about the X.400 authoritative domain ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies a string value for the X.400 authoritative domain. Enter either the GUID or the name of the remote domain. @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyCollection.md index 52656dd2d1..bbfb2641f2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example imports the DLP policy collection in the file C:\\My Documents\\DLP ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DLP policy you want to import. The DLP policy must exist in the XML file you specify with the FileData parameter. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileData parameter specifies the DLP policy collection file you want to import. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyTemplate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyTemplate.md index 812c878550..1399990e4d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyTemplate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyTemplate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example imports the DLP policy template file C:\\My Documents\\External DLP ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileData parameter specifies the DLP policy template file you want to import. @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-ExchangeCertificate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-ExchangeCertificate.md index 506ea14827..69bbc1e97c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-ExchangeCertificate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-ExchangeCertificate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ This example imports a chain of certificates from the PKCS #7 file C:\\Certifica ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileData parameter specifies the contents of the certificate file that you want to import. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Instance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FriendlyName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FriendlyName parameter specifies a friendly name for the certificate. The value must be less than 64 characters. @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Password -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Password parameter specifies the password that's required to import the certificate. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivateKeyExportable -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PrivateKeyExportable parameter specifies whether the certificate has an exportable private key and controls whether you can export the certificate from this server. Valid values are: @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-JournalRuleCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-JournalRuleCollection.md index 66936d5797..103cbbca56 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-JournalRuleCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-JournalRuleCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example imports journal rules from the XML file named ExportedJournalRules. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of a journal rule to be imported. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileData parameter specifies the XML file that contains the exported journal rule collection from the Export-JournalRuleCollection cmdlet. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-RecipientDataProperty.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-RecipientDataProperty.md index 772de76e50..abff75dbab 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-RecipientDataProperty.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-RecipientDataProperty.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example imports the picture file for Ayla Kol. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox or contact that you're adding the picture or spoken name file to. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileData parameter specifies the picture or spoken name file that you want to import. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Picture -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Picture switch specifies that you're importing the user's picture file. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SpokenName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SpokenName switch specifies that you're importing the user's spoken name file. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-TransportRuleCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-TransportRuleCollection.md index cb5499437f..8da3bcf345 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-TransportRuleCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-TransportRuleCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example imports a transport rule collection from the XML file named Exporte ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FileData parameter specifies the XML file that contains the exported transport rule collection from the Export-TransportRuleCollection cmdlet. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Install-TransportAgent.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Install-TransportAgent.md index b05098dde5..cabaefff7e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Install-TransportAgent.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Install-TransportAgent.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example shows how a fictitious application named Test App is installed in t ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the display name of the transport agent to be installed. The length of the name can't exceed 64 characters. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssemblyPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AssemblyPath parameter specifies the location of the transport agent Microsoft.NET assembly. Universal Naming Convention (UNC) file paths can't be used. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportAgentFactory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransportAgentFactory parameter specifies the Microsoft.NET class type of the transport agent factory. The developer of the transport agent being installed provides the transport agent factory and related information. For more information, see the documentation provided by the developer of the transport agent. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportService -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransportService parameter specifies the transport service that you want to view or modify. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-ComplianceSearchActionStep.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-ComplianceSearchActionStep.md index 815fd65f2d..e32f56a522 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-ComplianceSearchActionStep.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-ComplianceSearchActionStep.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This cmdlet is reserved for internal Microsoft use. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance This cmdlet is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance This cmdlet is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Step -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance This cmdlet is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-MonitoringProbe.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-MonitoringProbe.md index 62068c483c..62251f7198 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-MonitoringProbe.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-MonitoringProbe.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example creates an Exchange ActiveSync monitoring probe on the EX1 server. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the monitoring probe to run. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Account -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Account parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox or user account that's used to run the monitoring probe. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Endpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Endpoint parameter specifies the name of the monitoring probe endpoint to connect to, for example, contoso.mail.com. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ItemTargetExtension -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ItemTargetExtension parameter specifies cmdlet extension data that you can pass to the monitoring probe. The probe that runs on the server might require specific data for its execution. This data is presented to the probe on execution in an XML format. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Password -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Password parameter specifies the password of the mailbox or user account that's used to run the monitoring probe. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PropertyOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PropertyOverride parameter specifies a property that you want to override, for example, to set the time-out value to be extended beyond the default value. @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SecondaryAccount parameter specifies the identity of the delegate mailbox or user account that's used to run the monitoring probe. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SecondaryEndpoint parameter specifies the name of the secondary monitoring probe endpoint to connect to, for example, contoso.mail.fabrikam.com. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SecondaryPassword parameter specifies the password of the delegate mailbox or user account that's used to run the monitoring probe. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TimeOutSeconds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TimeOutSeconds parameter specifies the monitoring operation time-out period. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Mount-Database.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Mount-Database.md index 041d064d31..ab7bc9a6e9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Mount-Database.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Mount-Database.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example mounts the database MyDatabase. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies mailbox database that you want to mount. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptDataLoss switch specifies that you accept the data loss caused by missing committed transaction log files without asking for confirmation. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NewCapacity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NewCapacity switch specifies that you want to trigger the forced creation of a database only if all copies of the database don't have an .edb file. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-ActiveMailboxDatabase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-ActiveMailboxDatabase.md index 34ab7820b4..f5020e52c7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-ActiveMailboxDatabase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-ActiveMailboxDatabase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ This example performs a server switchover for the Mailbox server MBX1. All activ ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox database that you want to activate. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the server that you want to move all active mailbox databases from. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivatePreferredOnServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActivatePreferredOnServer parameter specifies the Mailbox server where you want to activate all mailbox databases that have copies with an ActivationPreference value of 1. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivateOnServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActivateOnServer parameter specifies the name of the Mailbox server on which the mailbox database copy should be activated. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipAllChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipAllChecks switch specifies whether to skip all checks. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MountDialOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MountDialOverride parameter is used to override the auto database mount dial (AutoDatabaseMountDial) setting for the target server and specify an alternate setting. Valid value are: @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveAllDatabasesOrNone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MoveAllDatabasesOrNone switch specifies whether to prevent any databases from moving if a single active database on the server can't be moved. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MoveComment parameter specifies an optional administrative reason for the move operation. The comment is recorded in the Event log. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipActiveCopyChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipActiveCopyChecks switch specifies whether to skip checking the current active copy to see if it's currently a seeding source for any passive databases. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipClientExperienceChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipClientExperienceChecks switch specifies whether to skip the search catalog (content index) state check to see if the search catalog is healthy and up to date. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipCpuChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipCpuChecks switch specifies whether to skip the high CPU utilization checks. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipHealthChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipHealthChecks switch specifies whether to bypass passive copy health checks. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipLagChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipLagChecks switch specifies whether to allow a copy to be activated that has replay and copy queues outside of the configured criteria. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMaximumActiveDatabasesChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipMaximumActiveDatabasesChecks switch specifies whether to skip checking the value of MaximumPreferredActiveDatabases during the best copy and server selection (BCSS) process. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMoveSuppressionChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipMoveSuppressionChecks switch specifies whether to skip the move suppression checks. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TerminateOnWarning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TerminateOnWarning switch specifies whether to terminate the task and output an error message if a warning is encountered during the switchover operation. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-AddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-AddressList.md index fa8ea18b19..9892cff13c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-AddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-AddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example moves the address list with GUID c3fffd8e-026b-41b9-88c4-8c21697ac8 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the address list that you want to move. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Target -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Container parameter specifies where to move the address list. Valid input for this parameter is under the root "\\" (also known as All Address Lists) or under an existing address list. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-DatabasePath.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-DatabasePath.md index 529019505c..bd0bd4b690 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-DatabasePath.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-DatabasePath.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example sets a new path for the mailbox database specified by the mailbox d ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the database that you want to move. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigurationOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigurationOnly switch specifies whether to change the configuration of the database without moving any files. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EDBFilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EdbFilePath parameter specifies a new file path for the database. All current database files are moved to this location. The default location is `%ExchangeInstallPath%Mailbox\LocalCopies\MBDatabase.edb`. This file path can't be the same as the path for the backup copy of the database. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFolderPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogFolderPath parameter specifies the folder where log files are stored. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EDBFilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EdbFilePath parameter specifies a new file path for the database. All current database files are moved to this location. The default location is ``%ExchangeInstallPath%Mailbox\LocalCopies\MBDatabase.edb`. This file path can't be the same as the path for the backup copy of the database. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-OfflineAddressBook.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-OfflineAddressBook.md index a9ca973abe..68e4449b9b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-OfflineAddressBook.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-OfflineAddressBook.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example moves OAB generation in Exchange 2010 to the server named Server1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the GUID, distinguished name (DN), or OAB name that represents a specific OAB. You can also include the path by using the format Server\\OfflineAddressBookName. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AcceptedDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AcceptedDomain.md index bd520684c0..06426431a7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AcceptedDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AcceptedDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example creates the new authoritative accepted domain Contoso. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the accepted domain object. @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainName parameter specifies the SMTP domain that you want to establish as an accepted domain. Valid input for the DomainName parameter is an SMTP domain. You can use a wildcard character to specify all subdomains of a specified domain, as shown in the following example: \*.contoso.com. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainType parameter specifies the type of accepted domain that you want to configure. Valid values are Authoritative, InternalRelay or ExternalRelay. You must set at least one value. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md index 831cfa333c..f8372ace21 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example creates a device access rule that uses the UserAgent characteristic ### -AccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AccessLevel parameter specifies the access level of devices that are defined by the rule. Valid values for this parameter are Allow, Block and Quarantine. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Characteristic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Characteristic parameter specifies the device characteristic or category that's used by the rule. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueryString -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The QueryString parameter specifies the device identifier that's used by the rule. This parameter uses a text value that's used with Characteristic parameter value to define the device. Wildcards or partial matches aren't allowed. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md index 2b7ff6ccd4..139dad571a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ This example creates the Mobile Device mailbox policy Contoso that has several p ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the policy. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBluetooth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBluetooth parameter specifies whether the Bluetooth capabilities of the mobile phone are allowed. The available options are Disable, HandsfreeOnly, and Allow. The default value is Allow. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBrowser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBrowser parameter specifies whether Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer is allowed on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't affect non-Microsoft browsers. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowCamera -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowCamera parameter specifies whether the mobile phone's camera is allowed. The default value is $true. @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowConsumerEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowConsumerEmail parameter specifies whether the mobile phone user can configure a personal email account on the device. The default value is $true. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowDesktopSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowDesktopSync parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can synchronize with a desktop computer through a cable. The default value is $true. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowExternalDeviceManagement -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowExternalDeviceManagement parameter specifies whether an external device management program is allowed to manage the device. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowHTMLEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowHTMLEmail parameter specifies whether HTML email is enabled on the device. The default value is $true. @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowInternetSharing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowInternetSharing parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can be used as a modem to connect a computer to the Internet. The default value is $true. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowIrDA -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowIrDA parameter specifies whether infrared connections are allowed to the mobile phone. The default value is $true. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowMobileOTAUpdate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowMobileOTAUpdate parameter specifies whether certain updates are seen by devices that implemented support for this restricting functionality. Further control can be specified via the MobileOTAUpdateMode parameter. @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowNonProvisionableDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online When set to $true, the AllowNonProvisionableDevices parameter enables all devices to synchronize with the computer running Exchange, regardless of whether the device can enforce all the specific settings established in the Mobile Device mailbox policy. This also includes devices managed by a separate device management system. When set to $false, this parameter blocks these devices that aren't provisioned from synchronizing with the server running Exchange. The default value is $false. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowPOPIMAPEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowPOPIMAPEmail parameter specifies whether the user can configure a POP3 or IMAP4 email account on the device. The default value is $true. @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowRemoteDesktop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowRemoteDesktop parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can initiate a remote desktop connection. The default value is $true. @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSimpleDevicePassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSimpleDevicePassword parameter specifies whether a simple device password is allowed. A simple device password is a password that has a specific pattern, such as 1111 or 1234. The default value is $true. @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation parameter specifies whether the messaging application on the device can negotiate the encryption algorithm in case a recipient's certificate doesn't support the specified encryption algorithm. @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMESoftCerts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMESoftCerts parameter specifies whether S/MIME software certificates are allowed. The default value is $true. @@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowStorageCard -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowStorageCard parameter specifies whether the device can access information stored on a storage card. The default value is $true. @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowTextMessaging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowTextMessaging parameter specifies whether text messaging is allowed from the device. The default value is $true. @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedApplications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedApplications parameter specifies whether unsigned applications can be installed on the device. The default value is $true. @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages parameter specifies whether unsigned installation packages can be run on the device. The default value is $true. @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowWiFi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowWiFi parameter specifies whether wireless Internet access is allowed on the device. The default value is $true. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlphanumericDevicePasswordRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlphanumericDevicePasswordRequired parameter specifies whether the device password must be alphanumeric. The default value is $false. @@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApprovedApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApprovedApplicationList parameter specifies a list of approved applications for the device. @@ -570,7 +570,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AttachmentsEnabled parameter specifies whether the user can download attachments. When set to $false, the user is blocked from downloading attachments. The default value is $true. @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeviceEncryptionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeviceEncryptionEnabled parameter, when set to $true, enables device encryption on the mobile phone. The default value is $false. Currently, only the storage card can be encrypted on devices running Windows Mobile 6.0 or later. We recommend that you don't use this setting and use the RequireStorageCardEncryption parameter instead. @@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePasswordEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online When set to $true, the DevicePasswordEnabled parameter specifies that the user set a password for the device. The default value is $false. @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePasswordExpiration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePasswordExpiration parameter specifies the length of time, in days, that a password can be used. After this length of time, a new password must be created. The format of the parameter is dd.hh.mm:ss, for example, 24.00:00 = 24 hours. @@ -663,7 +663,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePasswordHistory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePasswordHistory parameter specifies the number of previously used passwords to store. When a user creates a password, the user can't reuse a stored password that was previously used. @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePolicyRefreshInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePolicyRefreshInterval parameter specifies how often the policy is sent from the server to the mobile phone @@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IrmEnabled parameter specifies whether Information Rights Management (IRM) is enabled for the mailbox policy. @@ -737,7 +737,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether this policy is the default Mobile Device mailbox policy. The default value is $false. If another policy is currently set as the default, setting this parameter replaces the old default policy with this policy. @@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefaultPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether this policy is the default Mobile Device mailbox policy. The default value is $false. If another policy is currently set as the default, setting this parameter replaces the old default policy with this policy. @@ -773,7 +773,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAttachmentSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxAttachmentSize parameter specifies the maximum size of attachments that can be downloaded to the mobile phone. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -791,7 +791,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxCalendarAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxCalendarAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum range of calendar days that can be synchronized to the device. Valid values are: @@ -815,7 +815,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxDevicePasswordFailedAttempts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxDevicePasswordFailedAttempts parameter specifies the number of attempts a user can make to enter the correct password for the device. You can enter any number from 4 through 16. The default value is 8. @@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum number of days of email items to synchronize to the device. @@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which email messages are truncated when synchronized to the device. The value is specified in kilobytes (KB). @@ -880,7 +880,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which HTML-formatted email messages are synchronized to the device. The value is specified in KB. @@ -898,7 +898,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInactivityTimeDeviceLock -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxInactivityTimeDeviceLock parameter specifies the length of time that the device can be inactive before the password is required to reactivate the device. You can enter any interval between 30 seconds and 1 hour. The default value is 15 minutes. The format of the parameter is hh.mm:ss, for example, 15:00 = 15 minutes. @@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinDevicePasswordComplexCharacters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MinDevicePasswordComplexCharacters parameter specifies the minimum number of complex characters required in a device password. A complex character isn't a letter. @@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinDevicePasswordLength -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MinDevicePasswordLength parameter specifies the minimum number of characters in the device password. You can enter any number from 1 through 16. The maximum length a password can be is 16 characters. The default value is 4. @@ -952,7 +952,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordRecoveryEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordRecoveryEnabled parameter specifies whether you can store the recovery password for the device on an Exchange server. When set to $true, you can store the recovery password for the device on an Exchange server. The default value is $false. The recovery password can be viewed from either Outlook on the web or the Exchange admin center. @@ -970,7 +970,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireDeviceEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireDeviceEncryption parameter specifies whether encryption is required on the device. The default value is $false. @@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether you must encrypt S/MIME messages. The default value is $false. @@ -1006,7 +1006,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies what required algorithm must be used when encrypting a message. @@ -1024,7 +1024,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming parameter specifies whether the device must synchronize manually while roaming. The default value is $false. @@ -1042,7 +1042,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies what required algorithm must be used when signing a message. @@ -1060,7 +1060,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether the device must send signed S/MIME messages. @@ -1078,7 +1078,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireStorageCardEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireStorageCardEncryption parameter specifies whether encryption of a storage card is required. The default value is $true. @@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnapprovedInROMApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UnapprovedInROMApplicationList parameter specifies a list of applications that can't be run in ROM. @@ -1114,7 +1114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UNCAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UNCAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows file shares is enabled. Access to specific shares is configured on the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. @@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1150,7 +1150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WSSAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services is enabled. Access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md index ff2968558b..57c9747043 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example creates an Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory for the company Fo ### -ApplicationRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationRoot parameter specifies the metabase path of the virtual directory. By default, this path is the same as the website in which the virtual directory is created. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AppPoolId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AppPoolId parameter specifies the IIS application pool in which the virtual directory runs. We recommend that you leave this parameter at its default setting. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAuthenticationMethods parameter restricts the authentication methods that can be used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. Valid values are: @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InstallProxySubDirectory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InstallProxySubDirectory parameter was used to create an subdirectory that was required for proxying ActiveSync connections with Exchange 2007. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalAuthenticationMethods parameter restricts the authentication methods that can be used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. Valid values are: @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Path parameter specifies the file system path of the virtual directory. We recommend using this parameter only when you need to use a custom location for the virtual directory files. The default value is blank ($null), which indicates the default location is used. @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the IIS website under which the virtual directory is created. You don't need to use this parameter to create the virtual directory under the default website. @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressBookPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressBookPolicy.md index 36f586f9a4..f9491f7295 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressBookPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressBookPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example creates an address book policy with the following settings: ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the address book policy. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressLists -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddressLists parameter specifies the address lists for mailbox users who are assigned this address book policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalAddressList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GlobalAddressList parameter specifies the GAL for mailbox users who are assigned this address book policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the GAL. For example: @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OfflineAddressBook parameter specifies the OAB for mailbox users who are assigned this address book policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OAB. For example: @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoomList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RoomList parameter specifies an address list that used for location experiences for mailbox users who have this address book policy assigned to them. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressList.md index 8c147fdbe2..a87dfe3fdd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ This example creates the address list AL\_AgencyB that includes mailboxes that h ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the new address list. The maximum length is 64 characters, and it can't include a carriage return or a backslash (\\). If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludedRecipients parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientFilter parameter specifies a custom OPATH filter that's based on the value of any available recipient property. You can use any available Windows PowerShell operator, and wildcards and partial matches are supported. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCompany parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Company property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute1 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute1 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute10 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute10 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute11 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute11 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute12 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute12 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute13 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute13 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute14 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute14 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute15 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute15 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute2 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute2 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute3 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute3 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute4 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute4 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute5 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute5 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute6 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute6 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute7 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute7 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute8 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute8 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute9 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute9 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalDepartment parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Department property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalStateOrProvince parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's StateOrProvince property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Container -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Container parameter specifies where to create the address list. Valid input for this parameter is under the root "\\" (also known as All Address Lists) or under an existing address list. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the address list. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -661,7 +661,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -688,7 +688,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressRewriteEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressRewriteEntry.md index 0d8d06f58d..6512dfd601 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressRewriteEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressRewriteEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example creates an address rewrite entry that rewrites all email addresses ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for this address rewrite entry. @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAddress parameter specifies the final email addresses that you want. If the InternalAddress parameter specifies a single email address (chris@contoso.com), the ExternalAddress parameter must also specify a single email address (support@contoso.com). If the InternalAddress parameter specifies a single domain (contoso.com) or a domain and all subdomains (\*.contoso.com), the ExternalAddress parameter must specify a single domain (fabrikam.com). @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalAddress parameter specifies the original email addresses that you want to change. You can use the following values: @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptionList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExceptionList parameter specifies the email address domains that shouldn't be rewritten when the InternalAddress parameter contains the wildcard character to rewrite addresses in a domain and all subdomains (\*.contoso.com). You can enter multiple domain values in the ExceptionList parameter separated by commas. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutboundOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OutboundOnly parameter enables or disables outbound-only address rewriting. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The value $true means address rewriting occurs in outbound mail only. The value $false means address rewriting occurs on outbound mail and also on inbound mail (rewritten email addresses are changed back to the original email addresses in inbound mail). The default value is $false. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AdminAuditLogSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AdminAuditLogSearch.md index 18a80d3e96..19b0cf5723 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AdminAuditLogSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AdminAuditLogSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ This example returns entries in the administrator audit log of an Exchange Onlin ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatusMailRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The StatusMailRecipients parameter specifies the recipients that should receive the administrator audit log report. The recipient must be a valid SMTP address. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Cmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Cmdlets parameter specifies the cmdlets you want to search for in the administrator audit log. Only the log entries that contain the cmdlets you specify are returned. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalAccess parameter returns only audit log entries for cmdlets that were run by a user outside of your organization. In Exchange Online, use this parameter to return audit log entries for cmdlets run by Microsoft datacenter administrators. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the administrator audit log search. The name is shown in the subject line of the audit log report email message. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ObjectIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ObjectIds parameter specifies that only administrator audit log entries that contain the specified changed objects should be returned. This parameter accepts a variety of objects, such as mailboxes, aliases, Send connector names and so on. @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Parameters parameter specifies the parameters you want to search for in the administrator audit log. Only the log entries that contain the parameters you specify are returned. You can only use this parameter if you use the Cmdlets parameter. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The UserIds parameter specifies that only the administrator audit log entries that contain the specified ID of the user who ran the cmdlet should be returned. @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-App.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-App.md index 89e31054bb..30d95ae4f1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-App.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-App.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowReadWriteMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowReadWriteMailbox switch specifies whether the app allows read/write mailbox permission. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultStateForUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultStateForUser parameter specifies the default initial state of an organization app. Valid values are: @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DownloadOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DownloadOnly switch specifies whether to get the app manifest file and prompt the user for confirmation before committing to actual installation. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the app is available to users in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Etoken -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileData parameter specifies the location of the app manifest file. You need to specify only one source location for the app manifest file. You can specify the app manifest file by using the MarketplaceServicesUrl, Url, or FileData parameter. @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileStream -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileStream parameter is used only by the Exchange admin center to support the app file uploader. Don't use this parameter to specify the app manifest file. You can specify the app manifest file by using the MarketplaceServicesUrl, Url or FileData parameter. @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox where you want to install the app. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarketplaceAssetID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MarketplaceAssetID parameter specifies the Office Store identifier for the app. You need to use this parameter if you use theMarketplaceServicesUrl parameter. @@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarketplaceCorrelationID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MarketplaceCorrelationID parameter specifies the Office Store correlation identifier for the app. @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarketplaceQueryMarket -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MarketplaceQueryMarket parameter specifies the locale that an app is filed under at the office marketplace. For example, an app for the United States market in English uses the value en-US. The default value is en-US. @@ -513,7 +513,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarketplaceServicesUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MarketplaceServicesUrl parameter specifies the full services URL for the app. You need to specify only one source location for the app manifest file. You can specify the app manifest file by using the MarketplaceServicesUrl, Url or FileData parameter. @@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarketplaceUserProfileType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MarketplaceUserProfileType parameter specifies the user profile type for the Office Store. @@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationApp -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizationApp switch specifies that the scope of the app is organizational (not bound to a specific user). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivateCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrivateCatalog switch specifies whether the app is located in a private catalog. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProvidedTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProvidedTo parameter specifies the availability of the app in your organization. Valid values are: @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Url -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Url parameter specifies the full URL location of the app manifest file that you want to install. You need to specify only one source location for the app manifest file. You can specify the app manifest file by using the MarketplaceServicesUrl, Url or FileData parameter. @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserList parameter specifies who can use an organizational app. This parameter is limited to 1000 users. In the cloud-based service, this value is less relevant as Office Add-in management is moving to [Centralized Deployment](https://learn.microsoft.com/office/dev/add-ins/publish/centralized-deployment). @@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthRedirect.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthRedirect.md index 4b5e2d74af..d1e633e1c3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthRedirect.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthRedirect.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example creates an OAuth redirection object with the following settings: ### -AuthScheme -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthScheme parameter specifies the authentication scheme that's used by the authentication redirection object. Typically, this value is Bearer. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TargetUrl parameter specifies the FQDN of the Exchange Client Access Server that's responsible for processing the redirected OAuth authentication requests. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthServer.md index 7b361bd869..5099979d85 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This command creates an authorization server object with the specified settings. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the authorization server object. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthMetadataUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthMetadataUrl parameter specifies the URL for the Microsoft 365 authorization server for your cloud-based organization. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Type -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Type parameter specifies the type of authorization tokens that are issued by the authorization server. Valid values are: @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationIdentifier -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available in the April 18, 2025 Hotfix update (HU) for Exchange 2019 CU15 and Exchange 2016 CU23. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in Exchange Server 2016 (CU18 or higher) and Exchange Server 2019 (CU7 or higher). @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the authorization server is enabled. Valid values are: @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustAnySSLCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TrustAnySSLCertificate switch allows Exchange to accept certificates from untrusted certification authorities (CAs). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthenticationPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthenticationPolicy.md index a0774f7214..7859c4f25f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthenticationPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthenticationPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ In Exchange 2019, this example creates a new authentication policy named Researc ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the authentication policy. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthActiveSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthAutodiscover -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthImap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthMapi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthOfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthPop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthRpc -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthWebServices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthActiveSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthAutodiscover -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthImap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthMapi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -665,7 +665,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthOfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -685,7 +685,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthPop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthRpc -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthWebServices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md index 044ee90f33..b1efe2e9ee 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example creates the virtual directory autodiscover under the website autodi ### -ApplicationRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationRoot parameter specifies the metabase path of the virtual directory. By default, this path is the same as the website in which the virtual directory is created. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AppPoolId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AppPoolId parameter specifies the IIS application pool in which the virtual directory runs. We recommend that you leave this parameter at its default setting. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DigestAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DigestAuthentication parameter specifies whether Digest authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuthAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OAuthAuthentication parameter specifies whether OAuth authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Path parameter specifies the file system path of the virtual directory. We recommend using this parameter only when you need to use a custom location for the virtual directory files. The default value is blank ($null), which indicates the default location is used. @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the IIS website under which the virtual directory is created. You don't need to use this parameter to create the virtual directory under the default website. @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSecurityAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WSSecurityAuthentication parameter specifies whether WS-Security (Web Services Security) authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClassificationRuleCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClassificationRuleCollection.md index 3c89147d16..66d655e57c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClassificationRuleCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClassificationRuleCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example imports the classification rule collection file C:\\My Documents\\E ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileData parameter specifies the classification rule collection file you want to import. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClientAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClientAccessRule.md index ee0bc3376f..23ba2b0095 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClientAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClientAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ This example creates a new client access rule named Block ActiveSync that blocks ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the client access rule. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Action parameter specifies the action for the client access rule. Valid values for this parameter are AllowAccess and DenyAccess. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges parameter specifies a condition for the client access rule that's based on the client's IPv4 or IPv6 address. Valid values are: @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfProtocols -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AnyOfProtocols parameter specifies a condition for the client access rule that's based on the client's protocol. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether the client access rule is enabled or disabled. Valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptAnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptAnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges parameter specifies an exception for the client access rule that's based on the client's IPv4 or IPv6 address. Valid values are: @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptUsernameMatchesAnyOfPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies a priority value for the rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, the value 0 is the highest priority, and rules can't have the same priority value. @@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Scope parameter specifies the scope of the client access rule. Valid values are: @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsernameMatchesAnyOfPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: True ### -UserRecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearch.md index d3311f357a..1d65d88cca 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ This example creates a new compliance search named AnnBeebe-InactiveMailbox that ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Name parameter specifies the name of the compliance search. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowNotFoundExchangeLocationsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The AllowNotFoundExchangeLocationsEnabled parameter specifies whether to include mailboxes other than regular user mailboxes in the compliance search. Valid values are: @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentMatchQuery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The ContentMatchQuery parameter specifies a content search filter. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Description parameter specifies an optional description for the compliance search. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The ExchangeLocation parameter specifies the mailboxes to include. Valid values are: @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeLocationExclusion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Language -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Language parameter specifies the language for the compliance search. @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatusMailRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearchAction.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearchAction.md index bb12c6f155..e8e407d23b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearchAction.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearchAction.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ This example exports the results returned by the content search named "Case 321 ### -SearchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The SearchName parameter specifies the name of the existing content search to associate with the content search action. You can specify multiple content searches separated by commas. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeArchiveFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Export -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileTypeExclusionsForUnindexedItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Format -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance In Security & Compliance PowerShell, this parameter requires the Export role. By default, this role is assigned only to the eDiscovery Manager role group. @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The IncludeCredential switch specifies whether to include the credential in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JobOptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotifyEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotifyEmailCC -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Preview -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance In Security & Compliance PowerShell, this parameter requires the Preview role. By default, this role is assigned only to the eDiscovery Manager role group. @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Purge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: In Security & Compliance PowerShell, this switch is available only in the Search and Purge role. By default, this role is assigned only to the Organization Management and Data Investigator role groups. @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PurgeType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: In Security & Compliance PowerShell, this parameter is available only in the Search and Purge role. By default, this role is assigned only to the Organization Management and Data Investigator role groups. @@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReferenceActionName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Region -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Report -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetryOnError -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The RetryOnError switch specifies whether to retry the action on any items that failed without re-running the entire action all over again. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scenario -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance In Security & Compliance PowerShell, this parameter requires the Preview role. By default, this role is assigned only to the eDiscovery Manager role group. @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SharePointArchiveFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShareRootPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -770,7 +770,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Version -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -788,7 +788,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md index fb2266e405..f5a9a1faf0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ This example prevents the user from performing any compliance search actions on ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Action parameter specifies that type of search action that the filter is applied to. Valid values are: @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The FilterName parameter specifies the name for the compliance security filter. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Users -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Users parameter specifies the user who gets this filter applied to their searches. Valid values are: @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Description parameter specifies a description for the compliance security filter. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Filters parameter specifies the search criteria for the compliance security filter. The filters are applied to the users specified by the Users parameter. You can create three different types of filters: @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Region -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Region parameter specifies the satellite location for multi-geo tenants to conduct eDiscovery searches in. Valid values are: @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DataClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DataClassification.md index 4fd215d87d..814dda3ec9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DataClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DataClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example creates a new data classification rule named "Contoso Employee-Cust ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies a description for the data classification rule. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fingerprints -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Fingerprints parameter specifies the byte-encoded files to use as document fingerprints. You can use multiple document fingerprints separated by commas. For instructions on how to import documents to use as templates for fingerprints, see [New-Fingerprint](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/exchangepowershell/new-fingerprint) or the Examples section. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the data classification rule. The value must be less than 256 characters. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClassificationRuleCollectionIdentity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Locale -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Locale parameter specifies the language that's associated with the data classification rule. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md index dbe1a8d9f5..ef1b7794e4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ This example creates a DAG named DAG3. DAG3 is configured to use SERVER1 for the ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the new DAG of up to 15 characters. The name you use must not conflict with any computer name in the organization. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivityState -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DagConfiguration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses parameter specifies one or more static IPv4 addresses to the DAG when a Mailbox server is added to a DAG. If you specify the value Any or 0.0.0.0, the system attempts to lease one or more IPv4 addresses from a DHCP server to assign to the DAG. If you don't use this parameter, or if you specify the value 255.255.255.255 or None, the DAG is created without a cluster administrative access point. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileSystem -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileSystem parameter specifies the file system that's used for the DAG. Valid values are: @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThirdPartyReplication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ThirdPartyReplication parameter specifies to configure and enable a DAG to use non-Microsoft replication that leverages the Exchange Third Party Replication API instead of the built-in continuous replication. Valid values are Enabled and Disabled. After this mode is enabled, it can't be changed. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WitnessDirectory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WitnessDirectory parameter specifies the name of the directory on the witness server used to store file share witness data. The directory and share should be hosted on an Exchange server other than any of the Mailbox servers in the DAG. This allows an Exchange administrator to maintain operational control over the directory. The specified directory can't be used by any other DAGs, or used for any purpose other than for the witness server. If you don't use this parameter, the default witness directory is used. @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WitnessServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WitnessServer parameter specifies the name of a server used as a quorum witness when the DAG contains an even number of members. The specified server can't be a member of the DAG that's configured to use it. A stand-alone Mailbox server, or a Mailbox server in another DAG is recommended. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md index 002a7d6101..03792b5b80 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example creates the DAG network DAG1Repl in the DAG DAG1. A subnet of 10.0. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the DAG network being created. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseAvailabilityGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DatabaseAvailabilityGroup parameter specifies the name of the DAG that'll use the network being created. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Description parameter specifies an optional description of up to 256 characters for the DAG network being created. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreNetwork -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreNetwork parameter excludes the DAG network from use by the DAG. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplicationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplicationEnabled parameter specifies whether the DAG network being created is enabled for continuous replication. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Subnets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Subnets parameter specifies the subnets for the DAG network being created. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DeliveryAgentConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DeliveryAgentConnector.md index 3320d9ce11..40b22a450d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DeliveryAgentConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DeliveryAgentConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ The address space for the connector is c=US;a=Fabrikam;p=Contoso. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of this delivery agent connector. The value for the Name parameter can't exceed 64 characters. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressSpaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AddressSpaces parameter specifies the domain names that the delivery agent connector is responsible for. The complete syntax for entering an address space is: `AddressSpaceType:AddressSpace;AddressSpaceCost`. Enclose each address space in quotation marks ("). @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliveryProtocol -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeliveryProtocol parameter specifies the communication protocol that determines which delivery agents are responsible for servicing the connector. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Comment parameter specifies an optional comment. If you specify a value that contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("), for example: "This is an admin note". @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the delivery agent connector is enabled. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsScopedConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsScopedConnector parameter specifies the availability of the connector to other Mailbox servers. If the value of this parameter is $false, the connector can be used by all Mailbox servers in your organization. If the value of this parameter is $true, the connector can only be used by Mailbox servers in the same Active Directory site. The default value is $false. @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConcurrentConnections parameter specifies the maximum number of concurrent connections this connector accepts from a specific IP address. The default value is 5. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that's allowed to pass through this connector. When you enter a value, qualify the value with one of the following units: @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessagesPerConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessagesPerConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of messages this connector accepts per connection. The connector terminates the connection after this limit is reached, and the sending server has to initiate a new connection to send more messages. The default value is 20. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceTransportServers parameter specifies the list of Mailbox servers that host this connector. You can specify more than one server by separating their names with commas. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DistributionGroup.md index a8e5f0ae79..d42dea38c6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ This example creates a distribution group named ITDepartment and specifies the m ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the group. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassNestedModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ByPassNestedModerationEnabled parameter specifies how to handle message approval when a moderated group contains other moderated groups as members. Valid values are: @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CopyOwnerToMember -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CopyOwnerToMember switch specifies whether group owners specified by the ManagedBy parameter are also members of the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the group. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreNamingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IgnoreNamingPolicy switch specifies whether to prevent this group from being affected by your organization's group naming policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter specifies an owner for the group. A group must have at least one owner. If you don't use this parameter to specify the owner when you create the group, the user account that created the group is the owner. The group owner is able to: @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MemberDepartRestriction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MemberDepartRestriction parameter specifies the restrictions that you put on requests to leave the group. Valid values are: @@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MemberJoinRestriction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MemberJoinRestriction parameter specifies the restrictions that you put on requests to join the group. Valid values are: @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Members -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Members parameter specifies the recipients (mail-enabled objects) that are members of the group. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this group. A moderator approves messages sent to the group before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -544,7 +544,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Notes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Notes parameters specifies additional information about the object. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the location in Active Directory where the group is created. @@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoomList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RoomList switch specifies that all members of this distribution group are room mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Type -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Type parameter specifies the type of group that you want to create. Valid values are: @@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DlpPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DlpPolicy.md index e366f86920..fb92390c12 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DlpPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DlpPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example creates a new DLP policy named Contoso PII with the following value ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a descriptive name for the DLP policy. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies an optional description for the DLP policy. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mode parameter specifies the action and notification level of the DLP policy. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Parameters parameter specifies the parameter values that are required by the DLP policy template that you specify using the Template or TemplateData parameters. DLP policy templates might contain parameters that need to be populated with values from your organization. For example, a DLP policy template might include an exception group that defines users who are exempt from the DLP policy. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -State -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The State parameter enables or disables the DLP policy. Valid input for this parameter is Enabled or Disabled. By default, a new DLP policy that you create is enabled. If you want to create a disabled DLP policy, specify the value Disabled for this parameter. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Template -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Template parameter specifies the existing DLP policy template from which you can create a new DLP policy. You can't use the Template and TemplateData parameters in the same command. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TemplateData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TemplateData parameter specifies an external DLP policy template file from which you can create a new DLP policy. You can't use the TemplateData and Template parameters in the same command. @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DynamicDistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DynamicDistributionGroup.md index 97a2f8867f..4cf94192f6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DynamicDistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DynamicDistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ This example creates a dynamic distribution group named Washington Management Te ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the dynamic distribution group. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IncludedRecipients parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientFilter parameter specifies a custom OPATH filter that's based on the value of any available recipient property. You can use any available Windows PowerShell operator, and wildcards and partial matches are supported. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCompany parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Company property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute1 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute1 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute10 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute10 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute11 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute11 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute12 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute12 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute13 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute13 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute14 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute14 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute15 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute15 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute2 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute2 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute3 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute3 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute4 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute4 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute5 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute5 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute6 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute6 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute7 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute7 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute8 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute8 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute9 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute9 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalDepartment parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Department property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalStateOrProvince parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's StateOrProvince property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the dynamic distribution group. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -712,7 +712,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -784,7 +784,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the organizational unit (OU) where the dynamic distribution group is created. @@ -815,7 +815,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. @@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientContainer parameter specifies a filter that's based on the recipient's location in Active Directory. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -886,7 +886,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EcpVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EcpVirtualDirectory.md index d7db96a683..825155ed1e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EcpVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EcpVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example creates the ECP virtual directory on the Exchange server named Serv ### -AppPoolId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AppPoolId parameter sets the IIS application pool where the ECP virtual directory runs. We recommend that you leave this parameter at its default setting. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Path parameter sets the file system path of the ECP virtual directory. This parameter should be used with care and only when you must use a different file system path than the default. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the IIS website where the ECP virtual directory is created. @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSubscription.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSubscription.md index 0f3c1a24b3..4732c31488 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSubscription.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSubscription.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ This example also imports the Edge Subscription file generated in Example 1 to t ### -AccountExpiryDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AccountExpiryDuration parameter specifies how soon the EdgeSync bootstrap replication account (ESBRA) created by this command expires. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateInboundSendConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CreateInboundSendConnector parameter specifies whether to create the Send connector to connect the Edge Transport server and the Hub Transport servers. The default value is $true. The Send connector address space is set to "--", the smart hosts are set to "--", the Edge Transport server is set as the source server and Domain Name System (DNS) routing is disabled. This parameter is only used when you run the command on the Hub Transport server. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateInternetSendConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CreateInternetSendConnector parameter specifies whether to create the Send connector to connect to the Internet. The default value is $true. The Send connector address space is set to all domains (\*), the Edge Transport server is set as the source server, and DNS routing is enabled. This parameter is only used when you run the command on the Hub Transport server. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileData parameter specifies the byte-encoded data object that contains the Edge Subscription file information. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileName parameter specifies the full path of the Edge Subscription file. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Site -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Site parameter specifies the name of the Active Directory site that contains the Mailbox servers with which the Edge Transport servers are associated. This parameter is used and required only when you run the command on a Mailbox server. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md index c64ac8e72c..3558c79196 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ This example creates EdgeSync service settings with the following configuration: ### -ConfigurationSyncInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigurationSyncInterval parameter specifies how frequently the EdgeSync service synchronizes configuration data. The default value is 3 minutes. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CookieValidDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CookieValidDuration parameter specifies how long a cookie record is valid. The default value is 21 days. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FailoverDCInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FailoverDCInterval parameter specifies how long EdgeSync waits before failing over to another domain controller if it can't read configuration data from Active Directory. The default value is 5 minutes. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LockDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LockDuration parameter specifies how long an instance of the EdgeSync service can maintain an exclusive lock on the synchronization rights. While an EdgeSync service maintains an exclusive lock on synchronization rights, no other EdgeSync service can take over synchronization. The default value is 6 minutes. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LockRenewalDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LockRenewalDuration parameter specifies how long before the expiry of an exclusive lock an EdgeSync service can renew the lock. The default value is 4 minutes. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogEnabled parameter enables or disables the EdgeSync log. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogLevel parameter specifies the EdgeSync logging level. Valid values are: @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum duration in days to keep the EdgeSyncLog files. Log files older than the specified value can be overwritten. The default value is 30 days. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum amount of disk space the EdgeSyncLog directory can use. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum log file size for the EdgeSyncLog files. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogPath parameter specifies the default location for the EdgeSyncLog files. The default value is TransportRoles\\Logs\\EdgeSync\\. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OptionDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OptionDuration parameter specifies how long an instance of the EdgeSync service can maintain an optional lock on synchronization rights. While an EdgeSync service maintains an optional lock on synchronization rights, another EdgeSync service can take over synchronization after the optional lock has expired if it's initiated using the Start-EdgeSynchronization command. The default value is 30 minutes. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientSyncInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientSyncInterval parameter specifies how frequently the EdgeSync service synchronizes recipient data from the global catalog. The default value is 5 minutes. @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Site -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Site parameter specifies the Active Directory site that EdgeSync connects to for synchronizing configuration and recipient data. @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EmailAddressPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EmailAddressPolicy.md index aaa242cc86..47015880ec 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EmailAddressPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EmailAddressPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ This example creates an email address policy in an on-premises Exchange organiza ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the email address policy. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnabledEmailAddressTemplates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EnabledEmailAddressTemplates parameter specifies the rules in the email address policy that are used to generate email addresses for recipients. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnabledPrimarySMTPAddressTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EnabledPrimarySMTPAddressTemplate parameter specifies the rule in the email address policy that's used to generate the primary SMTP email addresses for recipients. You can use this parameter instead of the EnabledEmailAddressTemplates if the policy only applies the primary email address and no additional proxy addresses. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -644,7 +644,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -764,7 +764,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisabledEmailAddressTemplates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -812,7 +812,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Priority parameter specifies the order that the email address policies are evaluated. By default, every time that you add a new email address policy, the policy is assigned a priority of N+1, where N is the number of email address policies that you've created. @@ -888,7 +888,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -915,7 +915,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeCertificate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeCertificate.md index 9c2195d866..34bd153ff5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeCertificate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeCertificate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ This example creates a new DER encoded (binary) certificate renewal request file ### -BinaryEncoded -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BinaryEncoded switch specifies whether to encode the new certificate request by using Distinguished Encoding Rules (DER). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainName parameter specifies one or more FQDNs or server names for theSubject Alternative Name field (also known as the Subject Alt Name or SAN field) of the certificate request or self-signed certificate. @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FriendlyName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FriendlyName parameter specifies a friendly name for the certificate request or self-signed certificate. The value must be less than 64 characters. @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenerateRequest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GenerateRequest switch specifies that you're creating a certificate request for a certification authority (CA). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeAcceptedDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeAcceptedDomains switch specifies that all accepted domains in the Exchange organization are included in the Subject Alternative Name field of the certificate request or self-signed certificate. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeAutoDiscover -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeAutoDiscover switch specifies whether to add a Subject Alternative Namevalue with the prefix autodiscover for each accepted domain in the Exchange organization. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeServerFQDN -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeServerFQDN switch specifies that the FQDN of the Exchange server is included in the Subject Alternative Name field of the new certificate request or self-signed certificate. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeServerNetBIOSName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeServerNetBIOSName switch specifies that the NetBIOS name of the Exchange server is included in the Subject Alternative Name field of the new certificate request or self-signed certificate. You don't need to specify a value with this switch @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Instance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -KeySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The KeySize parameter specifies the size (in bits) of the RSA public key that's associated with the new certificate request or self-signed certificate. Valid values are: @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivateKeyExportable -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PrivateKeyExportable parameter specifies whether the certificate has an exportable private key, and controls whether you can export the certificate from the server (and import the certificate on other servers). Valid values are: @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Services -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Services parameter specifies the Exchange services that the new self-signed certificate is enabled for. Valid values are: @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectKeyIdentifier -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SubjectKeyIdentifier parameter specifies the unique subject key identifier for a newself-signed certificate. For example, run the command: $ski = [System.Guid]::NewGuid().ToString("N"), and use the value $ski for this parameter. @@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SubjectName parameter specifies the Subject field of the certificate request or self-signed certificate. @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeSettings.md index 230a474641..8341371024 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example creates a new Exchange settings object for the Audit configuration ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of a valid Exchange configuration schema that you want to create an Exchange settings object for. Valid values are @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-FederationTrust.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-FederationTrust.md index 15c47b377e..3068107b6d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-FederationTrust.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-FederationTrust.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example creates the federation trust Microsoft Federation Gateway with a ce ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a friendly name for the federation trust. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationUri -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationUri parameter specifies the primary domain used for the federated organization identifier. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipNamespaceProviderProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipNamespaceProviderProvisioning switch specifies that the trust and federated organization identifier are provisioned externally without using federation functionality in Microsoft Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Thumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Thumbprint parameter specifies the thumbprint of a certificate issued by a public certification authority (CA) trusted by the Microsoft Federation Gateway. For more details, see [Federation](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/federation-exchange-2013-help). @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdministratorProvisioningId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdministratorProvisioningId parameter specifies the provisioning key returned by the Microsoft Federation Gateway when an organization has already registered a SiteID or ApplicationID. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationIdentifier -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationIdentifier parameter specifies the SiteID or ApplicationID when an organization has already registered a SiteID or ApplicationID. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MetadataUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MetadataUrl parameter specifies the URL where WS-FederationMetadata is published by the Microsoft Federation Gateway. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseLegacyProvisioningService -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UseLegacyProvisioningService switch specifies that the legacy interface on the Microsoft Federation Gateway is used for managing the federation trust, including federated domains, certificates, and federation metadata. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Fingerprint.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Fingerprint.md index 223d295bfa..1e126802d1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Fingerprint.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Fingerprint.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example creates a new document fingerprint based on the file C:\\My Documen ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileData parameter specifies the file to use as a document fingerprint. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies a description for the document fingerprint. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ForeignConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ForeignConnector.md index 4dc46016af..7903f6f0e9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ForeignConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ForeignConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example creates a Foreign connector with the following properties: ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name for the Foreign connector. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressSpaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AddressSpaces parameter specifies the domain names to which the Foreign connector sends messages. The complete syntax for entering each address space is: `AddressSpaceType:AddressSpace;AddressSpaceCost`. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsScopedConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsScopedConnector parameter specifies the availability of the connector to other Mailbox servers. When the value of this parameter is $false, the connector can be used by all Mailbox servers in the Exchange organization. When the value of this parameter is $true, the connector can be used only by Mailbox servers in the same Active Directory site. The default value is $false. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceTransportServers parameter specifies the names of the Mailbox servers that use this Foreign connector. Having a single Foreign connector homed on multiple servers provides fault tolerance and high availability if one of the Mailbox servers fails. The default value of this parameter is the name of the server on which this Foreign connector is first installed. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-GlobalAddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-GlobalAddressList.md index e642369e00..2bdd854f7b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-GlobalAddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-GlobalAddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ This example creates the GAL named GAL\_AgencyB by using the RecipientFilter par ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the global address list. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludedRecipients parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientFilter parameter specifies a custom OPATH filter that's based on the value of any available recipient property. You can use any available Windows PowerShell operator, and wildcards and partial matches are supported. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCompany parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Company property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute1 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute1 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute10 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute10 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute11 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute11 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute12 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute12 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute13 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute13 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute14 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute14 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute15 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute15 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute2 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute2 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute3 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute3 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute4 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute4 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute5 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute5 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute6 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute6 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute7 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute7 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute8 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute8 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute9 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute9 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalDepartment parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Department property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalStateOrProvince parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's StateOrProvince property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-HybridConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-HybridConfiguration.md index 8ba792670c..2d22f8387f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-HybridConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-HybridConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Domains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Domains parameter specifies the domain namespaces used in the hybrid deployment. These domains must be configured as accepted domains in either on-premises Exchange or Exchange Online. The domains are used in configuring the organization relationships and Send and Receive connectors used by the hybrid configuration. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EdgeTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EdgeTransportServers parameter specifies the Edge Transport servers that are configured to support the hybrid deployment features. The Edge Transport server must be accessible from the internet on port 25. Valid values are: @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalIPAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalIPAddresses parameter is a legacy parameter that specifies the publicly accessible inbound IP address of Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 Hub Transport servers. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Features -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Features parameter specifies the features that are enabled for the hybrid configuration. Valid values are: @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OnPremisesSmartHost -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OnPremisesSmartHost parameter specifies the FQDN of the on-premises Exchange Mailbox server used for secure mail transport between on-premises Exchange and Exchange Online. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceivingTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceivingTransportServers parameter specifies the Mailbox servers defined in the outbound connector configuration in Exchange Online. Valid values are: @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendingTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendingTransportServers parameter specifies the Mailbox servers defined in the inbound connector configuration in Exchange Online. Valid values are: @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServiceInstance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is meaningful only in Office 365 operated by 21Vianet in China. @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsCertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsCertificateName parameter specifies the X.509 certificate to use for TLS encryption. Valid syntax for this parameter is `"X.500IssuerX.500Subject"`: @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-InboxRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-InboxRule.md index 7afb9dee03..435d789401 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-InboxRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-InboxRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ This example raises the message importance to High if the mailbox owner is in th ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the Inbox rule. The maximum length is 512 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromMessageId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FromMessageId parameter specifies the message that's used to create the Inbox rule. The rule is based on the properties of the message. You identify the message by its Base64-encoded StoreObjectId property value. For example: @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ValidateOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ValidateOnly switch specifies whether to evaluate the potential success or failure of the command without making changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlwaysDeleteOutlookRulesBlob -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlwaysDeleteOutlookRulesBlob switch hides a warning message when you use Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App) or Exchange PowerShell to modify Inbox rules. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplyCategory parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that applies the specified category to messages. A valid value is any text value that you want to define as a category. You can specify multiple categories separated by commas. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplySystemCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplySystemCategory parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that applies the specified system category to messages. System categories are available to all mailboxes in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BodyContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the body of messages. @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CopyToFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CopyToFolder parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that copies messages to the specified mailbox folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteMessage parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that sends messages to the Deleted Items folder. Valid values are: @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteSystemCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteSystemCategory parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that deletes the specified system category from messages. System categories are available to all mailboxes in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfBodyContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the body of messages. @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFlaggedForAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfFlaggedForAction parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks messages with the specified message flag. Valid values are: @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfFrom parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified sender in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the sender. For example: @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfFromAddressContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in the sender's email address. @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasAttachment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfHasAttachment parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with attachments. Valid values are: @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfHasClassification parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified message classification. You can find message classifications by using the Get-MessageClassification cmdlet. You can specify multiple message classifications separated by commas. @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HeaderContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the header fields of messages. @@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMessageTypeMatches parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages of the specified type. Valid values are: @@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameInCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameInCcBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the Cc field. Valid values are: @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameInToBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameInToOrCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameInToOrCcBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To or Cc fields Valid values are. @@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameNotInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameNotInToBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner isn't in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfReceivedAfterDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfReceivedAfterDate parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received after the specified date. @@ -764,7 +764,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfReceivedBeforeDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfReceivedBeforeDate parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received before the specified date. @@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfRecipientAddressContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in recipient email addresses. @@ -808,7 +808,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentOnlyToMe -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSentOnlyToMe parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the only recipient is the mailbox owner. Valid values are: @@ -831,7 +831,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSentTo parameter specifies an exception that looks for recipients in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -860,7 +860,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSubjectContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field of messages. @@ -884,7 +884,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field or body of messages. @@ -908,7 +908,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithImportance parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified importance level. Valid values are: @@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMaximum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMaximum parameter specifies part of an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that smaller than specified maximum size. @@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMinimum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMinimum parameter specifies part of an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that are larger than the specified minimum size. @@ -996,7 +996,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithSensitivity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithSensitivity parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified sensitivity level. Valid values are: @@ -1021,7 +1021,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FlaggedForAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FlaggedForAction parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified message flag. Valid values are: @@ -1051,7 +1051,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1071,7 +1071,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardAsAttachmentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardAsAttachmentTo parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that forwards the message to the specified recipient as an attachment. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1098,7 +1098,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardTo parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that forwards the message to the specified recipient. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1125,7 +1125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -From -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The From parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified sender in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the sender. For example: @@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FromAddressContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in the sender's email address. @@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasAttachment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HasAttachment parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with attachments. Valid values are: @@ -1201,7 +1201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HasClassification parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified message classification. You can find message classifications by using the Get-MessageClassification cmdlet. You can specify multiple message classifications separated by commas. @@ -1221,7 +1221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HeaderContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the header fields of messages. @@ -1245,7 +1245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the Inbox rule. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -1274,7 +1274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarkAsRead -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MarkAsRead parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that marks messages as read. Valid values are: @@ -1295,7 +1295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarkImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MarkImportance parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that marks messages with the specified importance flag. Valid values are: @@ -1317,7 +1317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageTypeMatches parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages of the specified type. Valid values are: @@ -1349,7 +1349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveToFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MoveToFolder parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that moves messages to the specified mailbox folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -1382,7 +1382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameInCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameInCcBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the Cc field. Valid values are: @@ -1405,7 +1405,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameInToBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -1428,7 +1428,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameInToOrCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameInToOrCcBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To or Cc fields Valid values are. @@ -1451,7 +1451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameNotInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameNotInToBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner isn't in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -1474,7 +1474,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PinMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PinMessage parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that pins messages to the top of the Inbox. Valid values are: @@ -1495,7 +1495,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Priority parameter specifies a priority for the Inbox rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, @@ -1513,7 +1513,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceivedAfterDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReceivedAfterDate parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received after the specified date. @@ -1535,7 +1535,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceivedBeforeDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReceivedBeforeDate parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received before the specified date. @@ -1557,7 +1557,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientAddressContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in recipient email addresses. @@ -1579,7 +1579,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RedirectTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RedirectTo parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that redirects the message to the specified recipient. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1606,7 +1606,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendTextMessageNotificationTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1628,7 +1628,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentOnlyToMe -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentOnlyToMe parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the only recipient is the mailbox owner. Valid values are: @@ -1651,7 +1651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentTo parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified recipients. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1700,7 +1700,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StopProcessingRules -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StopProcessingRules parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that stops processing additional rules if the conditions of this Inbox rule are met. Valid values are:If set to $true, the StopProcessingRules parameter instructs Exchange to stop processing additional rules if the conditions of this Inbox rule are met. @@ -1721,7 +1721,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SubjectContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field of messages. @@ -1745,7 +1745,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SubjectOrBodyContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field or body of messages. @@ -1769,7 +1769,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1787,7 +1787,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithImportance parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified importance level. Valid values are: @@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithinSizeRangeMaximum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithinSizeRangeMaximum parameter specifies part of a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that are smaller than specified maximum size. @@ -1843,7 +1843,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithinSizeRangeMinimum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithinSizeRangeMinimum parameter specifies part of a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that are larger than the specified minimum size. @@ -1875,7 +1875,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithSensitivity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithSensitivity parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified sensitivity level. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-IntraOrganizationConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-IntraOrganizationConnector.md index 69e235ceee..20404af3e4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-IntraOrganizationConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-IntraOrganizationConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example creates an Intra-Organization connector named "MainCloudConnector" ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a friendly name for the Intra-Organization connector. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in double quotation marks. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DiscoveryEndpoint parameter specifies the externally-accessible URL that's used for the Autodiscover service for the domain that's configured in the Intra-Organization connector. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetAddressDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetAddressDomains parameter specifies the domain namespaces to use in the Intra-organization connector. These domains must have valid Autodiscover endpoints defined in their organizations. The domains and their associated Autodiscover endpoints are used by the Intra-Organization connector for feature and service connectivity. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter enables or disabled the Intra-organization connector. The valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-JournalRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-JournalRule.md index 97291cdb9b..86bcf47960 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-JournalRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-JournalRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example creates and enables a journal rule. The rule applies to all email m ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the journal rule. The name of the rule can be up to 64 characters long. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The JournalEmailAddress parameter specifies a recipient object to which journal reports are sent. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the journal rule is enabled or disabled. If the rule is disabled, it isn't applied to any email messages. The default value is $false. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recipient -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recipient parameter specifies the SMTP address of a mailbox, contact, or distribution group to journal. If you specify a distribution group, all recipients in that distribution group are journaled. All messages sent to or from a recipient are journaled. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Scope parameter specifies the scope of email messages to which the journal rule is applied. Valid values for this parameter are as follows: @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailContact.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailContact.md index 38a1dafa95..e6db45960c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailContact.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailContact.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example creates a new mail contact named Chris Ashton. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mail contact. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalEmailAddress parameter specifies the target email address of the mail contact or mail user. By default, this value is used as the primary email address of the mail contact or mail user. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mail contact. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FirstName parameter specifies the user's first name. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Initials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Initials parameter specifies the user's middle initials. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LastName parameter specifies the user's last name. @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MacAttachmentFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MacAttachmentFormat parameter specifies the Apple Macintosh operating system attachment format to use for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageBodyFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageBodyFormat parameter specifies the message body format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageBodyFormat parameter specifies the message body format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this mail contact. A moderator approves messages sent to the mail contact before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the location in Active Directory where the new contact is created. @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsePreferMessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UsePreferMessageFormat specifies whether the message format settings configured for the mail user or mail contact override the global settings configured for the remote domain or configured by the message sender. Valid value are: @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailMessage.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailMessage.md index a2f50ad71e..c27f6e123b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailMessage.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailMessage.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ This example creates an email message in the Drafts folder with the subject and ### -Body -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Body parameter specifies the content of the body section of the new email message. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BodyFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BodyFormat parameter specifies the format of the message body. The values can be PlainText, Rtf (Rich Text Format), or Html. By default, if the BodyFormat parameter isn't specified when the Body parameter is used, the message body is rendered in plain text. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Subject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Subject parameter specifies the content of the subject field of the new email message. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailUser.md index 3aa57b37d4..5f25229c09 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ This example creates a new mail user for Ed Meadows in the contoso.com cloud-bas ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mail user. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalEmailAddress parameter specifies the target email address of the mail contact or mail user. By default, this value is used as the primary email address of the mail contact or mail user. @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Password -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Password parameter specifies the password for the user's account. @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mail user. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, in address lists, and in Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FirstName parameter specifies the user's first name. @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImmutableId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ImmutableId parameter is used by GAL synchronization (GALSync) and specifies a unique and immutable identifier in the form of an SMTP address for an Exchange mailbox used for federated delegation when requesting Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) tokens. If federation is configured for this mailbox and you don't set this parameter when you create the mailbox, Exchange creates the value for the immutable ID based upon the mailbox's ExchangeGUID and the federated account namespace, for example, 7a78e7c8-620e-4d85-99d3-c90d90f29699@mail.contoso.com. @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Initials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Initials parameter specifies the user's middle initials. @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LastName parameter specifies the user's last name. @@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MacAttachmentFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MacAttachmentFormat parameter specifies the Apple Macintosh operating system attachment format to use for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageBodyFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageBodyFormat parameter specifies the message body format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageFormat parameter specifies the message format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the location in Active Directory where the new mail user is created. @@ -780,7 +780,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -804,7 +804,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemotePowerShellEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RemotePowerShellEnabled parameter specifies whether the user has access to Exchange PowerShell. Valid values are: @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetPasswordOnNextLogon -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -852,7 +852,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -872,7 +872,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsePreferMessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UsePreferMessageFormat specifies whether the message format settings configured for the mail user or mail contact override the global settings configured for the remote domain or configured by the message sender. Valid value are: @@ -917,7 +917,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Mailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Mailbox.md index 28c5437879..a8af131a6d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Mailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Mailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -810,7 +810,7 @@ This example assumes that you've already created a mail-enabled security group n ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mailbox. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -830,7 +830,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccountDisabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -852,7 +852,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Arbitration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -898,7 +898,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Discovery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Discovery switch is required to create Discovery mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableRoomMailboxAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -947,7 +947,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Equipment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Equipment switch is required to create equipment mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1007,7 +1007,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1029,7 +1029,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedMasterAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1054,7 +1054,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedRoom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Migration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Migration switch is required to create migration mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1114,7 +1114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Password -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Password parameter specifies the password for the mailbox (the user account that's associated with the mailbox). This parameter isn't required if you're creating a linked mailbox, resource mailbox, or shared mailbox, because the associated user accounts are disabled for these types of mailboxes. @@ -1138,7 +1138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolder switch is required to create public folder mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1180,7 +1180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Room -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Room switch is required to create room mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1204,7 +1204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Shared -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Shared switch is required to create shared mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1224,7 +1224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1246,7 +1246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy parameter specifies the mobile device mailbox policy that's applied to the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example:. @@ -1270,7 +1270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressBookPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1296,7 +1296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -1332,7 +1332,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Archive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Archive switch specifies that an archive mailbox is created for this mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1381,7 +1381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1405,7 +1405,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1429,7 +1429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuxAuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1453,7 +1453,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -1474,7 +1474,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1500,7 +1500,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mailbox. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, in address lists, and in Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1520,7 +1520,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1540,7 +1540,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FirstName parameter specifies the user's first name. @@ -1558,7 +1558,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1578,7 +1578,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HoldForMigration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HoldForMigration switch specifies whether to prevent any client or user, except the Microsoft Exchange Mailbox Replication service (MRS) process, from logging on to a public folder mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1600,7 +1600,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImmutableId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImmutableId parameter is used by GAL synchronization (GALSync) and specifies a unique and immutable identifier in the form of an SMTP address for an Exchange mailbox used for federated delegation when requesting Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) tokens. If federation is configured for this mailbox and you don't set this parameter when you create the mailbox, Exchange creates the value for the immutable ID based upon the mailbox's ExchangeGUID and the federated account namespace, for example, 7a78e7c8-620e-4d85-99d3-c90d90f29699@mail.contoso.com. @@ -1620,7 +1620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Initials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Initials parameter specifies the user's middle initials. @@ -1638,7 +1638,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromServingHierarchy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsExcludedFromServingHierarchy parameter prevents users from accessing the public folder hierarchy on this public folder mailbox. For load-balancing purposes, users are equally distributed across public folder mailboxes by default. When this parameter is set on a public folder mailbox, that mailbox isn't included in this automatic load-balancing and can't be accessed by users to retrieve the public folder hierarchy. However, if an administrator has set the DefaultPublicFolderMailbox property on a user mailbox to a specific public folder mailbox, the user can still access the specified public folder mailbox, even if the IsExcludedFromServingHierarchy parameter is set for that public folder mailbox. @@ -1656,7 +1656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LastName parameter specifies the user's last name. @@ -1674,7 +1674,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1794,7 +1794,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -1823,7 +1823,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -1846,7 +1846,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Office -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Office parameter specifies the user's physical office name or number. @@ -1864,7 +1864,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the location in Active Directory where the new mailbox is created. @@ -1889,7 +1889,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Phone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Phone parameter specifies the user's telephone number. @@ -1907,7 +1907,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. @@ -1947,7 +1947,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1967,7 +1967,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemotePowerShellEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemotePowerShellEnabled parameter specifies whether the user has access to Exchange PowerShell. Valid values are: @@ -1992,7 +1992,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetPasswordOnNextLogon -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResetPasswordOnNextLogon parameter specifies whether the user is required to change their password the next time they log on to their mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -2013,7 +2013,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceCapacity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResourceCapacity parameter specifies the capacity of the resource mailbox. For example, you can use this parameter to identify the number of seats in a conference room (room mailbox) or in a vehicle (equipment mailbox). A valid value is an integer. @@ -2031,7 +2031,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2061,7 +2061,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoleAssignmentPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RoleAssignmentPolicy parameter specifies the role assignment policy that's applied to the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the role assignment policy. For example: @@ -2087,7 +2087,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoomMailboxPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2123,7 +2123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2143,7 +2143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -2167,7 +2167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SharingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2195,7 +2195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SupervisoryReviewPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2235,7 +2235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThrottlingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2263,7 +2263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxAuditLogSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxAuditLogSearch.md index 4aa8ca23e8..a23fd4ffa8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxAuditLogSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxAuditLogSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ This example returns entries from the mailbox audit logs of all users in organiz ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatusMailRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StatusMailRecipients parameter specifies the email address where the search results are sent. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalAccess parameter specifies whether to return only audit log entries for mailbox access by users that are outside of your organization. In Exchange Online, this parameter returns audit log entries for mailbox access by Microsoft datacenter administrators. Valid values are: @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasAttachments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HasAttachments parameter filters the search by messages that have attachments. Valid values are: @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogonTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LogonTypes parameter specifies the type of logons. Valid values are: @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailboxes parameter specifies the mailbox to retrieve mailbox audit log entries from. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the search. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Operations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Operations parameter filters the search results by the operations that are logged by mailbox audit logging. Valid values are: @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowDetails switch specifies that details of each log entry are retrieved. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxDatabase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxDatabase.md index 13b7f9cdaf..53a44cc183 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxDatabase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxDatabase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ This example creates the mailbox database DB1 on the Mailbox server named Server ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the new mailbox database. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recovery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Recovery switch specifies that the new database is designated as a recovery database. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagExcludeFromMonitoring -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagExcludeFromMonitoring parameter specifies that the database being created should not be monitored by managed availability. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EdbFilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EdbFilePath parameter specifies the path to the database files. The default location is `%ExchangeInstallPath%Mailbox\\.edb`. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromInitialProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsExcludedFromInitialProvisioning switch specifies that this database is temporarily not considered by the mailbox provisioning load balancer. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsExcludedFromProvisioning parameter specifies whether this database is considered by the mailbox provisioning load balancer. If the IsExcludedFromProvisioning parameter is set to $true, no new mailboxes are automatically added to this database. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsSuspendedFromProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsSuspendedFromProvisioning parameter specifies whether this database is temporarily considered by the mailbox provisioning load balancer. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFolderPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogFolderPath parameter specifies the folder location for log files.The default location is `%ExchangeInstallPath%Mailbox\` @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OfflineAddressBook parameter specifies the associated offline address book (OAB) for the new mailbox database. @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PublicFolderDatabase parameter specifies the associated public folder database for the new mailbox database. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the public folder database. For example: @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipDatabaseLogFolderCreation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxExportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxExportRequest.md index a4d5b91ef0..2341ba1ddd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxExportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxExportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ComplianceStorePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FilePath parameter specifies the network share path of the .pst file to which data is exported, for example, \\\\SERVER01\\PST Files\\exported.pst. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssociatedMessagesCopyOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AssociatedMessagesCopyOption parameter specifies whether associated messages are copied when the request is processed. Associated messages are special messages that contain hidden data with information about rules, views, and forms. By default, associated messages are copied. This parameter accepts the following values: @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BatchName parameter specifies a descriptive name for exporting a batch of mailboxes. You can use the name in the BatchName parameter as a string search when you use the Get-MailboxExportRequest cmdlet. @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after completion before it's automatically removed. The default value is 30 days. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConflictResolutionOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConflictResolutionOption parameter specifies what to do if there are multiple matching messages in the target. Valid values are: @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE **Important**: You can't use this parameter to export between two dates. You can export from a specific date, or export to a specific date, but not both. @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentFilterLanguage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ContentFilterLanguage parameter specifies the language being used in the ContentFilter parameter for string searches. @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -474,7 +474,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeDumpster -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExcludeDumpster switch specifies whether to exclude the Recoverable Items folder. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExcludeFolders parameter specifies the list of folders to exclude during the export. @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeFolders parameter specifies the list of folders to include during the export. @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalFlags parameter specifies the optional steps in the request. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsArchive switch specifies that you're exporting from the user's archive. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -630,7 +630,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the specific request for tracking and display purposes. Because you can have multiple export requests per mailbox, Exchange precedes the name with the mailbox's alias. For example, if you create an export request for a user's mailbox that has the alias Kweku and specify the value of this parameter as PC1toArchive, the identity of this export request is Kweku\\PC1toArchive. @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreferredMessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the order in which the request should be processed in the request queue. Requests are processed in order, based on server health, status, priority, and last update time. Valid priority values are: @@ -741,7 +741,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -759,7 +759,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -784,7 +784,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipMerging parameter specifies steps in the export that should be skipped. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceRootFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceRootFolder parameter specifies the root folder of the mailbox from which data is exported. If this parameter isn't specified, the command exports all folders. @@ -820,7 +820,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Suspend switch specifies whether to suspend the request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -840,7 +840,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SuspendComment parameter specifies a description about why the request was suspended. You can only use this parameter if you specify the Suspend parameter. @@ -858,7 +858,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetRootFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TargetRootFolder parameter specifies the top-level folder in which to export data. If you don't specify this parameter, the command exports folders to the top of the folder structure in the target .pst file. Content is merged under existing folders, and new folders are created if they don't already exist in the target folder structure. @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxFolder.md index d7e9d64fe5..234aa513a8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example creates the folder named Personal in the root folder hierarchy of y ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the new folder. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Parent parameter specifies where to create the new mailbox folder. The syntax is `[MailboxID]:\[ParentFolder][\SubFolder]`. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxImportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxImportRequest.md index 3354f48df9..a97de519b4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxImportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxImportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssociatedMessagesCopyOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AssociatedMessagesCopyOption parameter specifies whether associated messages are copied when the request is processed. Associated messages are special messages that contain hidden data with information about rules, views, and forms. By default, associated messages are copied. This parameter accepts the following values: @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies a descriptive name for importing a batch of mailboxes. You can use the name in the BatchName parameter as a string search when you use the Get-MailboxImportRequest cmdlet. @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after completion before being automatically removed. The default value is 30 days. @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConflictResolutionOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConflictResolutionOption parameter specifies what to do if there are multiple matching messages in the target. Valid values are: @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentCodePage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ContentCodePage parameter specifies the specific code page to use for an ANSI pst file. ANSI pst files are used in Outlook 97 to Outlook 2002. You can find the valid values in the [Code Page Identifiers](https://learn.microsoft.com/windows/win32/intl/code-page-identifiers) topic. @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeDumpster -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExcludeDumpster switch specifies whether to exclude the Recoverable Items folder. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExcludeFolders parameter specifies the list of folders to exclude during the import. @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeFolders parameter specifies the list of folders to include during the import. @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsArchive switch specifies that you're importing the .pst file into the user's archive. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -751,7 +751,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the specific request for tracking and display purposes. Because you can have multiple import requests per mailbox, Exchange precedes the name with the mailbox's alias. For example, if you create an import request for a user's mailbox that has the alias Kweku and specify the value of this parameter as PC1toArchive, the identity of this import request is Kweku\\PC1toArchive. @@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -791,7 +791,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -836,7 +836,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipMerging parameter specifies steps in the import that should be skipped. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -872,7 +872,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceRootFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceRootFolder parameter specifies the root folder of the .pst file from which data is imported. When specified, the folder hierarchy outside the value of the SourceRootFolder parameter isn't imported, and the SourceRootFolder parameter is mapped to the TargetRootFolder parameter. If this parameter isn't specified, the command imports all folders. @@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend switch specifies whether to suspend the request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendComment parameter specifies a description about why the request was suspended. You can only use this parameter if you specify the Suspend parameter. @@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetRootFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetRootFolder parameter specifies the top-level mailbox folder that the imported content is placed in. If you don't specify this parameter, the command imports folders to the top of the folder structure in the target mailbox or archive. If the folder already exists, content is merged under existing folders, and new folders are created if they don't already exist in the target folder structure. @@ -946,7 +946,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRepairRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRepairRequest.md index 4342464833..0c6bc785d5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRepairRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRepairRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ This example creates a variable that identifies Ann Beebe's mailbox and then use ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Database parameter repairs or detects corruption in all mailboxes in the specified database. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to repair or detect corruption in. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StoreMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StoreMailbox parameter specifies the mailbox GUID of the mailbox you want to repair or detect corruption in. Use this parameter with the Database parameter. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CorruptionType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CorruptionType parameter specifies the type of corruption that you want to detect and repair. You can use the following values: @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Archive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Archive switch specifies whether to repair or detect corruption the archive mailbox that's associated with the specified mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DetectOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DetectOnly switch specifies that you want to report errors, but not fix them. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRestoreRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRestoreRequest.md index 4df394dfdc..095d7d0fc6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRestoreRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRestoreRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceMailbox parameter specifies the soft-deleted mailbox that you want to restore. The best way to identify the soft-deleted mailbox is by its GUID value. You can find the GUID value by running the following command: Get-Mailbox -SoftDeletedMailbox. @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceStoreMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetMailbox parameter specifies the GUID of the target mailbox or mail user where you want to restore content to. The target mailbox or mail user needs to exist before you can run this command successfully. @@ -513,7 +513,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowLegacyDNMismatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowLegacyDNMismatch switch specifies that the operation should continue if the LegacyExchangeDN of the source physical mailbox and the target mailbox don't match. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssociatedMessagesCopyOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AssociatedMessagesCopyOption parameter specifies whether associated messages are copied when the request is processed. Associated messages are special messages that contain hidden data with information about rules, views, and forms. Valid values are: @@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies a descriptive name for restoring a batch of mailboxes. You can use the name in the BatchName parameter as a string search when you use the Get-MailboxRestoreRequest cmdlet. @@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the status of a completed restore request is set to Completed. If this parameter is set to a value of 0, the status is cleared immediately instead of being changed to Completed. @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConflictResolutionOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConflictResolutionOption parameter specifies what to do if there are multiple matching messages in the target. Valid values are: @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeDumpster -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExcludeDumpster switch specifies whether to exclude the Recoverable Items folder. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -782,7 +782,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExcludeFolders parameter specifies the list of folders to exclude during the restore request. @@ -828,7 +828,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeFolders parameter specifies the list of folder to include during the restore request. @@ -874,7 +874,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -943,7 +943,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the specific request for tracking and display purposes. Because you can have multiple restore requests per mailbox, Exchange precedes the name with the mailbox's alias. For example, if you create an export request for a user's mailbox that has the alias Kweku and specify the value of this parameter as RestoreFailedMoves, the identity of this export request is Kweku\\RestoreFailedMoves. @@ -963,7 +963,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -992,7 +992,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1019,7 +1019,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipMerging parameter specifies folder-related items to skip when restoring the mailbox. Use one of the following values: @@ -1044,7 +1044,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceIsArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceIsArchive switch specifies that the source mailbox is an archive mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceRootFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceRootFolder parameter specifies the root folder of the mailbox from which data is restored. If this parameter isn't specified, the command restores all folders. @@ -1082,7 +1082,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend switch specifies whether to suspend the request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendComment parameter specifies a description about why the request was suspended. You can only use this parameter if you specify the Suspend parameter. @@ -1120,7 +1120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetIsArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetIsArchive switch specifies that the content is restored into the specified target mailbox's archive. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1138,7 +1138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetRootFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetRootFolder parameter specifies the top-level folder in which to restore data. If you don't specify this parameter, the command restores folders to the top of the folder structure in the target mailbox or archive. Content is merged under existing folders, and new folders are created if they don't already exist in the target folder structure. @@ -1158,7 +1158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetType parameter specifies the type of mailbox that's the target for the restore operation. Valid values are: @@ -1180,7 +1180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1198,7 +1198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxSearch.md index 36cb459e8b..9a3283d0a7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example creates an In-Place Hold named Hold for al ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a friendly name for the search. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllPublicFolderSources -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllPublicFolderSources parameter specifies whether to include all public folders in the organization in the search. Valid values are: @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllSourceMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllSourceMailboxes parameter specifies whether to include all mailboxes in the search. Valid values are: @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies a description for the search. The description isn't displayed to users. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EstimateOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EstimateOnly switch specifies that only an estimate of the number of items to be returned is provided. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeDuplicateMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExcludeDuplicateMessages parameter eliminates duplication of messages in search results. Valid values are: @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeKeywordStatistics -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeKeywordStatistics switch returns keyword statistics (number of instances for each keyword) in search results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeUnsearchableItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeUnsearchableItems switch specifies that items that couldn't be indexed by Exchange Search should be included in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InPlaceHoldEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The InPlaceHoldEnabled parameter specifies whether to set an In-Place Hold on items in the search results. Valid values are: @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InPlaceHoldIdentity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ItemHoldPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ItemHoldPeriod parameter specifies the number of days for the In-Place Hold onthe mailbox items (all mailbox items or the items that are returned in the search query results). The duration is calculated from the time the item is received or created in the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Language -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Language parameter specifies a locale for the search. @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LogLevel parameter specifies the logging level for the search. Valid values are: @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageTypes parameter specifies the message types to include in the search query. Valid values are: @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recipients parameter specifies one or more recipients to include in the search query. Messages that have the specified recipients in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields are returned in the search results. @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchQuery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SearchQuery parameter specifies keywords for the search query by using the Keyword Query Language (KQL). For more information, see [Keyword Query Language (KQL) syntax reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/sharepoint/dev/general-development/keyword-query-language-kql-syntax-reference) and [Keyword queries and search conditions for eDiscovery](https://learn.microsoft.com/purview/ediscovery-keyword-queries-and-search-conditions). @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Senders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Senders parameter specifies one or more senders to include in the search query. Messages that have the specified sender are returned in the search results. Senders can include users, distribution groups (messages sent by members of the group), SMTP addresses, or domains. @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceMailboxes parameter specifies the identity of one or more mailboxes to be searched. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -630,7 +630,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatusMailRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StatusMailRecipients parameter specifies one or more recipients to receive a status email message upon completion of the search. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetMailbox parameter specifies the destination mailbox where the search results are copied. You can use any value that uniquely identifies themailbox. For example: @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch doesn't work on this cmdlet. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterPolicy.md index 952710db59..2e11030806 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example creates a new malware filter policy named Contoso Malware Filter Po ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the malware filter policy. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AdminDisplayName parameter specifies a description for the policy. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassInboundMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassOutboundMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAlertText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomExternalBody -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomExternalBody parameter specifies the custom body to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from external senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomExternalSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomExternalSubject parameter specifies the custom subject to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from external senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomFromAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomFromAddress parameter specifies the custom From address to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal or external senders. @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomFromName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomFromName parameter specifies the custom From name to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal or external senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomInternalBody -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomInternalBody parameter specifies the custom body to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomInternalSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomInternalSubject parameter specifies the custom subject to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomNotifications parameter enables or disables the customization of notification messages for malware detections. Valid values are: @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableExternalSenderAdminNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnableExternalSenderAdminNotifications parameter enables or disables sending notification messages to an administrator for malware detections in messages from internal senders. Valid values are: @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableExternalSenderNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableInternalSenderAdminNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnableInternalSenderAdminNotifications parameter enables or disables sending notification messages to an administrator for malware detections in messages from internal senders. Valid values are: @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableInternalSenderNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalSenderAdminAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalSenderAdminAddress parameter specifies the email address of the administrator who receives notifications messages for malware detections in messages from external senders. @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalSenderAdminAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The InternalSenderAdminAddress parameter specifies the email address of the administrator who receives notifications messages for malware detections in messages from internal senders. @@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch.